(coordinates_in_window): Subtract 1 when computing right_x.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
6e417ca5
DL
19** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
20been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
21
5898e075
DL
22** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
23`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
24indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
25indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
26
abfcc168
GM
27** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
28sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 29(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
30You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
31
cc181e95
GM
32** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
33on the display using several methods
34
35- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
36a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
37be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
38
39- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
40equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
41
da4496b6 42- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
43
44- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
45the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
46
0daee095 47** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
48an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
49command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
50does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 51
176256a1 52** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
53`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
54typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 55
dd0add8e
DL
56** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
57characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
58
699238d9
GM
59** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
60compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
61this behavior.
62
63The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
64compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
65Emacs dump core.
66
67** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 68
7233c5bd
GM
69*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
70whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
71is useful for debugging X problems.
72
73Example:
74
699238d9 75 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 76
100b3cbb
GM
77*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
78visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
79the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
80and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
81visual class names are
82
83 TrueColor
84 PseudoColor
85 DirectColor
86 StaticColor
87 GrayScale
88 StaticGray
89
90Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
91`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
92meaning.
93
94The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
95supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
96`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
97visual.
98
99Example:
100
699238d9 101 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
102
103*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
104specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
105default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
106resource values are `true' or `on'.
107
108Example:
109
699238d9 110 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 111
0d0c76b8
EZ
112** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
113more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
114now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
115
42088c12 116** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 117display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
118shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
119be customized.
c60ea02e 120
31047e0d
DL
121** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
122
b02786f9
GM
123** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
124all frames except the selected one.
125
3261c1d8
DL
126** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
127to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
128
ffe36136
GM
129** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
130the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
131area or with tooltips.
132
559cee90
DL
133** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
134read mail from the menu etc.
135
271b4185
GM
136** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
137a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
138
0daee095
GM
139** Changes in Texinfo mode.
140
141** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
142macros
143
144 Key binding Macro
145 -------------------------
146 C-c C-c C-s @strong
147 C-c C-c C-e @emph
148 C-c C-c u @url
149 C-c C-c q @quotation
150 C-c C-c m @email
151
559cee90
DL
152** Changes in Outline mode.
153
154There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
155`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
156the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
157
404fa7d6
DL
158** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
159groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
160
8964fec7
SM
161** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
162or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
163several other special buffers.
164
39783d73
WP
165** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
166under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
167.emacs file.
168
169The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
170determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
171
d35fce81
GM
172** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
173abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
174`directory-abbrev-alist'.
175
df5a1902
GM
176** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
177is running in batch mode. For example,
178
179 (message "%s" (read t))
180
181will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
182to standard output.
183
a933dad1
DL
184** Faces and frame parameters.
185
186There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
187Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
188`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
189`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
190sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
191for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
192parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
193
194Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
195`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 196`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
197`default' face and vice versa.
198
f77a4a8a
GM
199** New face `menu'.
200
201The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
202Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
203attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
204
a933dad1
DL
205** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
206
207The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
208colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
209correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
210the screen gamma of a frame's display.
211
212PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
213in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
214color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
215
216The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
217`ScreenGamma'.
218
219** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
220
221The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
222Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
223oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
224of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
225the text.
226
227** Emacs has a new face implementation.
228
229The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
230font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
231height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
232These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
233specify a font.
234
235Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
236These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
237under Lisp changes, below.
238
239** New default font is Courier 12pt.
240
241** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
242its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
243it is hollow.
244
245** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
246truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
247foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
248customizing face `fringe'.
249
250** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
251can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
252
253** LessTif support.
254
255Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
256need a version 0.88.1 or later.
257
258** Toolkit scroll bars.
259
260Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
261LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
262configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
263bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
264bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
265Emacs.
266
267When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
268Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
269Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
270Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
271define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
272`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
273
274Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
275a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
276directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
277different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
278system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
279add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
280
281The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
282`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
283This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
284image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
285Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
286
287** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
288
289When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
290widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
291Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
292
293** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
294
295When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
296whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
297defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
298highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
299displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
300whitespace.
301
302** Busy-cursor.
303
304Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
305display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
306
307** Blinking cursor
308
309M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
310terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
311and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
312the group `cursor'.
313
314** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
315
316This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
317generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
318See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
319details.
320
321Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
322have to do anything to activate it.
323
324** Tabs and variable-width text.
325
326Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
327defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
328independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
329Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
330
331** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
332
333*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
334
335 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
336
79dd1637
RS
337The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
338LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 339
79dd1637
RS
340*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
341LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
342
343** Hscrolling in C code.
344
cc181e95
GM
345Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
346`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
347customized.
a933dad1
DL
348
349** Tool bar support.
350
351Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
352how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
353
354** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
355
356Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
357mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
358line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
359about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
360in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
361
362Currently, the following actions have been defined:
363
364- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
365buffers.
366
367- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
368M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
369
370- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
371
559cee90 372- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
373toggles the read-only status.
374
375- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
376
377** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
378
379When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 380from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
381non-nil.
382
383** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
384
385Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
386Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
387the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
388italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
389Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
390attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
391
392** Sound support
393
394Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
395(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
396Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
397(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
398to enable sound support.
399
400** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
401the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
402forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
403value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
404users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
405even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
406
407The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
408
409** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
410
411As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
412drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
413`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
414
415** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
416bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
417
418This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
419`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
420variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
421
422** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
423
424When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
425value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
426number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
427fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
428
429When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
430value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
431number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
432fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
433
434** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
435notably at the end of lines.
436
437All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
438spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
439
eee54b0e
DL
440There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
441
a933dad1
DL
442** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
443query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
444after each match to get the replacement text.
445
f0124b4a 446** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `E' that lets you
4ff40dd0
GM
447edit the replacement string.
448
449** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
450you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
451lisp-complete-symbol.
452
a933dad1
DL
453** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
454
455If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
456longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
457on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
458by setting the following variable:
459
460- User option: max-mini-window-height
461
462Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
463fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
464specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
465
466Default is 0.25.
467
0d43b60d
GM
468** Changes to hideshow.el
469
470Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
471selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
472
473*** Generalized block selection and traversal
474
475A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
476(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
477which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
478`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
479point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
480(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
481
482If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
483i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
484backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
485the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
486
487*** Isearch support for updating mode line
488
489During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
490blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
491line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
492portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
493is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
494
495To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
496something like this in your .emacs.
497
498 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
499 (lambda ()
500 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
501
559cee90
DL
502** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
503
504If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
505entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
506log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
507
508New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
509buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
510
511Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
512if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
513
514The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
515expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
516cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
517a file.
518
3476b54a
GM
519** Changes in Font Lock
520
521*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
522font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
523mode.
524
b3b98592
GM
525** Comint (subshell) changes
526
527Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
528and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
529
530The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
531buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
532buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
533
534The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
535M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
536the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
537
e26cec67
GM
538** Changes to Rmail mode
539
c0510d27
GM
540*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
541set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
542receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
543recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
544`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
545as correspondent.
546
547Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
548mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
549regexp matching your mail adresses.
550
3b55acc9
GM
551*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
552to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
553Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
554with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
555for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
556
6a1950ec
GM
557*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
558like `j'.
559
5bb6f079
RS
560*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
561specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 562digest message.
e26cec67 563
400a1ed0
GM
564** Changes to TeX mode
565
566The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
567`latex-mode'.
568
a933dad1
DL
569** Changes to RefTeX mode
570
571*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
572 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
573 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
574 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
575 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
576 can be edited from that buffer.
577
578*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
579 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
580 `A' to use all marked entries).
581
582*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
583 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
584
585*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
586 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
587 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
588 been cited.
589
38de9631
GM
590** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
591The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
592semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
593in column 1 are always made leaves.
594
a933dad1
DL
595** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
596has the following new features:
597
598*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
599may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
600to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
601time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
602
603*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
604feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
605file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
606compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
607pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
608defaults to 1.
609
610** Tooltips.
611
612Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
613mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
614can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
615
616Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
617variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
618the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
619tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
620
621** Customize changes
622
623*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
624`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
625cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
626
627*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
628Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
629default).
630
0ae51efb
GM
631*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
632between custom options. Example:
633
634 (defcustom default-input-method nil
635 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
636 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
637 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
638 :group 'mule
639 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
640 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
641
642This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
643current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
644first in a custom-set-variables statement.
645
a933dad1
DL
646** New features in evaluation commands
647
648The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
649modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
650print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
651customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
652eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
653
a933dad1
DL
654** Dired changes
655
656*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
657command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
658is, delete only empty directories.
659
660*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
661command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
662copy directories recursively.
663
f6737cde
GM
664*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
665in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
666the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
667
a933dad1
DL
668** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
669use the -f option when sending mail.
670
b1c609b1
GM
671** CC mode changes.
672
673Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
674current user setups (although it's believed that these
675incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
676However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
677back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
678compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
679release.
680
681*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
682When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
683variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
684take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
685is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
686settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
687possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
688Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
689
690By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
691special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
692the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
693of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
694above.
695
696Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
697when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
698function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
699call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
700then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
701values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
702only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
703function documentation for more info.
704
705The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
706especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
707with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
708intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
709such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
710is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
711configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
712global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
713
714(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
715
716**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
717This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
718
719This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
720variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
721completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
722the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
723empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
724style system.
725
726**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
727In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
728c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
729as far as possible.
730
731*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
732CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
733surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
734chapter about this in the manual.
735
736**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
737The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
738recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
739primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
740adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
741
742**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
743This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
744c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
745
746**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
747This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
748
749It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
750Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
751A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
752inside CC Mode.
753
754Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
755causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
756the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
757available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
758cc-mode/).
759
760**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
761The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
762specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
763literals.
764
765**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
766It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
767prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
768you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
769this function.
770
771*** Fixes to IDL mode.
772It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
773to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
774struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
775Thanks to Eric Eide.
776
777*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
778It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
779opening braces hangs and when they don't.
780
781**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
782
783*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
784See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
785better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
786and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
787
788*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
789previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
790the column specified by comment-column.
791
792*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
793In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
794is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
795prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
796contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
797don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
798
799*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
800instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
801arguments.
802
803*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
804
805*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
806c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
807c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
808variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
809Provan).
810
811*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
812
c407c570
GM
813** Makefile mode changes
814
815*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
816
817*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
818Fontlock mode is active.
819
87be76f6
GM
820** Isearch changes
821
c407c570
GM
822** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
823respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
824that started the search.
825
87be76f6 826*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
827selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
828
87be76f6
GM
829*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
830
d35fce81 831Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
832`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
833search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
834before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
835highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
836`secondary-selection'.
837
838The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
839will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
840Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
841using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
842usual snappy response.
843
844If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
845matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
846set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
847isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
848
35384f06
GM
849** Changes in sort.el
850
851The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 852as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
853new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
854numeric base.
87be76f6 855
d7b511c4
GM
856** Changes to Ange-ftp
857
858*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
859names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
860sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
861
d7b511c4
GM
862*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
863ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
864
4b9347b3
GM
865** Shell script mode changes.
866
867Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
868derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
869sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
870
79214ddf
FP
871** Etags changes.
872
873*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
874
aca0be23 875*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
876possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
877{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
878This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
879a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 880
79214ddf
FP
881*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
882declarations when given the --declarations option.
883
884*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 885"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
886
887*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
888types.
889
890*** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
891
892*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
893
894*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
895are now tagged.
896
897*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
898variables are tagged.
899
900*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
901
8dc78b52
FP
902*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
903for PSWrap.
79214ddf 904
f6737cde
GM
905** Changes in etags.el
906
3f6e4b8b
GM
907*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
908tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
909is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
910
f6737cde
GM
911*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
912the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
913
914If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
915FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
916TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
917obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
918
919TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
920
921FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
922List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
923
924A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
925
926 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
927 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
928 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
929
930*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
931of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
932
933*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
934names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
935
fbc164de
PE
936** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
937and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
938LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
939
59c1bf85
DL
940** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
941These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
942(Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
943currently no specific input method support for them.
944
e33b0397
DL
945** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
946remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
947appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
948
949** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
950
6f8ea2ae
DL
951** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
952
c0510d27
GM
953** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
954containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
955expression from that list, are not checked.
956
a933dad1
DL
957** New modes and packages
958
578979ee
GM
959*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
960facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
961separate Texinfo file.
962
dc1178bf
SM
963*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
964or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
965provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
966It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
967used to enter checkin log messages.
968
6abca616
EZ
969*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
970without invoking external programs.
971
972The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
973and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
974`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
975is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
976Groff or `troff' are not readily available.
977
978The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
979page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
980
5e5dff44
GM
981*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
982authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
983
984The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
985the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
986the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
987Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
988even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
989single step.
990
991On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
992matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
993probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
994contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
995
f7136ee8
GM
996*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
997unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
998actually modifying content of a buffer.
999
bbd9b566
GM
1000*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1001PostScript.
1002
1003Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1004
1005The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1006
1007 ; comment (until end of line)
1008 A non-terminal
1009 "C" terminal
1010 ?C? special
1011 $A default non-terminal
1012 $"C" default terminal
1013 $?C? default special
1014 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1015 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1016 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1017 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1018 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1019 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1020 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1021 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1022 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1023 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1024 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1025 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1026 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1027 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1028 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1029
1030Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1031
99453a38
GM
1032*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1033align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1034determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1035example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1036equal signs of assignments.
1037
559cee90
DL
1038*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1039paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1040
6448a6b3
GM
1041*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1042list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1043buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1044customize the package.
1045
249652b1
GM
1046*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1047replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1048is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1049and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1050not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1051which answers different needs.
1052
3476b54a
GM
1053*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1054suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1055expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1056course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1057reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1058to be enabled.
1059
8964fec7
SM
1060*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1061containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1062
a933dad1
DL
1063*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1064
1065*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1066
1067*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1068
1069*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1070Pascal) language.
1071
1072*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1073the text at point.
1074
1075*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1076
8d54eb69
DL
1077*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1078
a933dad1
DL
1079*** whitespace.el ???
1080
ebcfda83
GM
1081*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1082files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1083(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1084interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1085often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1086uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1087codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1088
1089*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1090
1091Here is an example of columns:
1092
1093horse apple bus
1094dog pineapple car EXTRA
1095porcupine strawberry airplane
1096
1097Doing the following settings:
1098
1099 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1100 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1101 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1102 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1103
1104
1105Selecting the lines above and typing:
1106
1107 M-x delimit-columns-region
1108
1109It results:
1110
1111[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1112[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1113[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1114
1115delim-col has the following options:
1116
1117 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1118 before all columns.
1119
1120 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1121 between each column.
1122
1123 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1124 after all columns.
1125
1126 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1127 each column.
1128
1129delim-col has the following commands:
1130
1131 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1132 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1133
f507826c
GM
1134*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1135were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1136is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1137
1138The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1139
1140To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1141
1142To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1143M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1144
1145To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1146M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1147
8062f458
DL
1148*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1149text.
1150
36e24b82 1151*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1152of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1153specific to Message mode.
1154
36e24b82
DL
1155*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1156viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1157with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1158
aaa659ef
DL
1159*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1160interface to access directory servers using different directory
1161protocols. It has a separate manual.
1162
eee54b0e
DL
1163*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1164for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1165
612839b6
GM
1166*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1167
1168*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1169minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1170
399da7e3
DL
1171*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1172with the diary features.
1173
6e417ca5
DL
1174*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1175numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1176
a933dad1
DL
1177** Withdrawn packages
1178
1179*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1180functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1181
3261c1d8
DL
1182*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1183
1184*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
a933dad1
DL
1185\f
1186* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1187
1188Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1189--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1190When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1191so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1192
399da7e3 1193+++
f0124b4a
DL
1194** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1195that offset in the file before writing.
1196
3bbc50af
DL
1197** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1198promised long ago.
1199
7464346d
GM
1200** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor
1201modes.
1202
c94f4677 1203- Function: add-minor-mode TOGGLE NAME &optional KEYMAP AFTER TOGGLE-FUN
7464346d 1204
c94f4677
GM
1205Register a new minor mode.
1206
1207TOGGLE is a symbol which is the name of a buffer-local variable that
1208is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is active or not.
1209
1210NAME specifies what will appear in the mode line when the minor mode
1211is active. NAME should be either a string starting with a space, or a
1212symbol whose value is such a string.
1213
1214Optional KEYMAP is the keymap for the minor mode that will be added
1215to `minor-mode-map-alist'.
1216
1217Optional AFTER specifies that TOGGLE should be added after AFTER
1218in `minor-mode-alist'.
1219
1220Optional TOGGLE-FUN is there for compatiblity with other Emacssen.
1221It is currently not used.
7464346d 1222
612839b6
GM
1223** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1224`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1225from which the command was issued.
1226
1227** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1228`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1229`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1230additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1231operate on.
1232
271b4185
GM
1233** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1234to `window-buffer-height'.
1235
1236- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1237
1238Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1239The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1240lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1241
1242Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1243respectively.
1244
1245If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1246COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1247
1248The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1249obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1250on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1251
1252Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1253buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1254possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1255is currently displayed in some window.
1256
3c30cb6e
DL
1257** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1258argument function's results.
1259
62f20204
GM
1260** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1261signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1262
c0510d27
GM
1263** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1264header is the list of headers passed to it.
1265
1266** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1267ignores differences in case and text representation.
1268
1269** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1270cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1271as follows:
1272
1273 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1274 nil don't display a cursor
1275 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1276 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1277 others display a box cursor.
1278
9a0dd3dc
GM
1279** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1280an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1281defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1282set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1283
d7b511c4 1284** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1285specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1286the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1287text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1288
1289Example:
1290
1291 (string-to-syntax "()")
1292 => (4 . 41)
1293
1fa28578
GM
1294** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1295other than 10.
1296
1297*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1298INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1299
1300 #b1111
1301 => 15
1302 #b-1111
1303 => -15
1304
1305*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1306
1307 #o666
1308 => 438
1309
1310*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1311
1312 #xbeef
1313 => 48815
1314
1315*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1316
1317 #2R-111
1318 => -7
1319 #25rah
1320 => 267
1321
3d4ff2dd 1322** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1323the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1324and isn't a string.
1325
3d4ff2dd
GM
1326** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1327a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1328value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1329not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1330
16ce590d
DL
1331+++
1332** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1333
73825616 1334** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1335for a regexp in a string.
1336
1337** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1338`mouse-position-function'.
1339
723e779c
GM
1340** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1341that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1342
d1e103b2
GM
1343** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1344Keywords are now always considered constants.
1345
31047e0d
DL
1346+++
1347** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1348returns it.
1349
7a85e4df
GM
1350** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1351returned by function `recent-keys'.
1352
02b14400
RS
1353+++
1354** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1355can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1356Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1357etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1358mode.
404fa7d6 1359
02b14400 1360+++
8964fec7
SM
1361** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1362and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1363
02b14400
RS
1364+++
1365** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1366has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1367function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1368returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1369been performed."
1370
1371When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1372and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1373hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1374then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1375
02b14400 1376+++
81da8b32
GM
1377** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1378In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1379and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1380
02b14400 1381+++
9e207b90
GM
1382** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1383with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1384specified table.
1385
1386 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1387
1388Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1389TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1390saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1391what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1392
02b14400 1393+++
d7f89643 1394** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1395Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1396
02b14400 1397+++
dde9e75a
GM
1398** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1399removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1400
02b14400 1401+++
9da30515
GM
1402** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1403instead of being optional.
1404
02b14400 1405+++
d20679eb
GM
1406** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1407modify read-only text.
1408
02b14400 1409+++
fbc164de
PE
1410** New functions and variables for locales.
1411
1412The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1413decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1414time functions like strftime. The new variables
1415`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1416locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1417
1418The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1419environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1420the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1421environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1422not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1423`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1424`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1425
02b14400 1426+++
863476d1
SM
1427** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1428To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1429modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1430start sequences.
1431
02b14400 1432+++
ef6d912c
GM
1433** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1434because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1435
02b14400 1436+++
a933dad1
DL
1437** New function `propertize'
1438
1439The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1440strings with text properties.
1441
1442- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1443
1444Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1445by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1446PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1447specified value of that property. Example:
1448
1449 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1450
1451+++
1452** push and pop macros.
1453
02b14400
RS
1454Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1455are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1456as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1457
1458(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1459(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1460 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1461
02b14400
RS
1462** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1463
6c7fd5aa
RS
1464Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1465are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1466
1467(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1468 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1469 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1470 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1471
1472(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1473 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1474 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1475 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1476
a933dad1
DL
1477+++
1478** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1479as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1480
1481[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1482[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1483[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1484[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1485[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1486 space, and DEL.
1487[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1488 and DEL.
1489[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1490 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1491 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1492[:alpha:] matches letters.
1493 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1494 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1495[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1496[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1497[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1498[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1499 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1500 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1501[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1502[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1503[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1504
1505+++
1506** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1507
1508The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1509
1510- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1511
1512The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1513are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1514
1515:test TEST
1516
1517TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1518Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1519it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1520
1521:size SIZE
1522
1523SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1524many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1525
1526:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1527
1528REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1529full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1530size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
15311.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1532old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1533
1534:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1535
1536THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1537hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1538(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1539
1540:weakness WEAK
1541
1542WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1543Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1544their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1545hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1546
1547- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1548
1549Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1550
1551- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1552
1553Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1554
1555- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1556
1557Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1558values are shared.
1559
1560- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1561
1562Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1563
1564- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1565
1566Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1567
1568- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1569
1570Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1571
1572- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1573
1574Returns the size of TABLE.
1575
1576- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1577
1578Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1579
1580- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1581
1582Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1583
1584- Function: clrhash TABLE
1585
1586Clear TABLE.
1587
1588- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1589
1590Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1591not found.
1592
79214ddf 1593- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1594
1595Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1596another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1597
1598- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1599
1600Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1601
1602- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1603
1604Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1605arguments KEY and VALUE.
1606
1607- Function: sxhash OBJ
1608
1609Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1610
1611- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1612
1613Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1614a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1615comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1616and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1617of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1618
1619TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1620
1621HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1622code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1623integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1624
1625Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1626be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1627
1628 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1629 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1630
1631 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1632 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1633
79214ddf 1634 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1635 'case-fold-string-hash))
1636
1637 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1638
1639+++
1640** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1641
1642It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1643circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1644a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1645
1646+++
1647** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1648
1649If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1650#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1651
a933dad1
DL
1652+++
1653** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1654t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1655specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1656is too short to reach that column.
1657
1658+++
1659** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1660now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1661after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1662two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1663
1664If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1665perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1666and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1667
1668+++
1669** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1670to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1671
1672+++
1673** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1674calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1675
1676+++
1677** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1678directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1679small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1680small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1681temporary-file-directory instead.
1682
1683+++
1684** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1685the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1686`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1687hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1688
1689+++
1690** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1691elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1692
1693+++
1694** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1695
1696make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1697creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1698ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1699
1700+++
1701** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1702
1703The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1704on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1705is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1706never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1707ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1708overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1709
1710If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1711that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1712to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1713The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1714
1715+++
1716** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1717
1718Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1719If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1720ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1721result string.
1722
1723Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1724string where arguments appear in the result string.
1725
1726Example:
1727
1728 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1729 (s2 "world"))
1730 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1731 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1732 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1733
1734results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1735
1736+++
1737** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1738
1739Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1740The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1741argument in it.
1742
1743 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1744 (arg "world"))
1745 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1746 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1747 (message msg arg))
1748
1749+++
1750** Sound support
1751
1752Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1753(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1754
1755Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1756(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1757to enable sound support.
1758
1759Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1760list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1761when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1762functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1763sound to play, before playing the sound.
1764
1765The following sound properties are supported:
1766
1767- `:file FILE'
1768
1769FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1770searched relative to `data-directory'.
1771
6fb40beb
GM
1772- `:data DATA'
1773
1774DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1775may be present, but not both.
1776
a933dad1
DL
1777- `:volume VOLUME'
1778
1779VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
17800..1. This property is optional.
1781
1782Other properties are ignored.
1783
1784** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1785
1786** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1787a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1788
1789** Changes to garbage collection
1790
1791*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1792of live and free strings.
1793
1794*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1795strings that have been consed so far.
1796
a933dad1
DL
1797\f
1798* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1799
1800Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1801--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1802When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1803so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1804
f6d3257b
GM
1805** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1806to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1807
1808Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1809text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1810is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1811your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1812laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1813just display it black instead.
1814
1815This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1816a line like
1817
1818 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1819
1820in your `.emacs'.
1821
a933dad1
DL
1822** New face implementation.
1823
1824Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
1825font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
1826
1827+++
1828*** New faces.
1829
1830Each face can specify the following display attributes:
1831
1832 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 1833
a933dad1
DL
1834 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
1835 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 1836
a933dad1 1837 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 1838
a933dad1 1839 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 1840
a933dad1 1841 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 1842
a933dad1 1843 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 1844
a933dad1
DL
1845 7. Background color.
1846
1847 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
1848
1849 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
1850
1851 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
1852
1853 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
1854
1855 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
1856 color.
1857
1858 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
1859 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
1860
1861Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
1862same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
1863frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
1864faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
1865with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
1866attributes mentioned above.
1867
1868There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
1869definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
1870created frames.
79214ddf 1871
a933dad1
DL
1872A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
1873have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
1874`fully-specified'.
1875
1876+++
1877*** Face merging.
1878
1879The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
1880combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
1881aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
1882properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
1883that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
1884results in a fully-specified face.
1885
1886+++
1887*** Face realization.
1888
1889After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
1890merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
1891realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
1892available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
1893face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
1894cache of the frame on which it was realized.
1895
1896Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
1897character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
1898for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
1899charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
1900
1901Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
1902specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
1903being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
1904the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
1905statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
1906
1907In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
1908`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
19090x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
1910the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
1911initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
1912Emacs.
1913
1914Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
1915`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
1916registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
1917with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
1918
1919++++
1920**** Clearing face caches.
1921
1922The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
1923on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
1924unused fonts.
1925
1926+++
1927*** Font selection.
79214ddf 1928
a933dad1
DL
1929Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
1930given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
1931for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
1932
1933If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
1934pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
1935family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
1936property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
1937an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
1938
1939Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
1940against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
1941match for the given face attributes in this font list.
1942
1943Font selection can be influenced by the user.
1944
1945The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
1946attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
1947face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
1948names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
1949that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
1950width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
1951to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
1952
1953Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
1954specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
1955face doesn't exist.
1956
1957+++
1958**** Scalable fonts
1959
1960Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
1961since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
1962servers.
1963
1964To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 1965`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
1966scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
1967Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
1968scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
1969that list. Example:
1970
1971 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
1972
1973allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
1974
1975+++
1976*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
1977
1978- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
1979
1980Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
1981is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
1982string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
1983
1984If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
1985the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
1986FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
1987POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
1988SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
1989These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
1990if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
1991REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
1992the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
1993of the face font sort order.
1994
79214ddf 1995- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
1996
1997Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
1998omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
1999(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2000non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2001
2002- Variable: font-list-limit
2003
2004Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2005won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2006matching font. The default is currently 100.
2007
2008+++
2009*** Setting face attributes.
2010
2011For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2012with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2013implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2014`face-attribute'.
2015
2016Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2017symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2018
2019The following attributes are recognized:
2020
2021`:family'
2022
2023VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2024or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2025and `?' are allowed.
2026
2027`:width'
2028
2029VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2030It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2031`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2032`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2033
2034`:height'
2035
2036VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
20371/10 pt.
2038
2039`:weight'
2040
2041VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2042symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2043`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2044
2045`:slant'
2046
2047VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2048symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2049`reverse-oblique'.
2050
2051`:foreground', `:background'
2052
2053VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2054
2055`:underline'
2056
2057VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2058VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2059a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2060don't underline.
2061
2062`:overline'
2063
2064VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2065VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2066string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2067overline.
2068
2069`:strike-through'
2070
2071VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2072striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2073face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2074is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2075
2076`:box'
2077
2078VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2079around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2080VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2081of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2082and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2083VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2084:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2085the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2086specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2087defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2088the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2089color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2090should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2091like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2092that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2093the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2094box.
2095
2096`:inverse-video'
2097
2098VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2099inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2100
2101`:stipple'
2102
2103If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2104The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2105searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2106HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2107is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2108explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2109
2110For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2111and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2112
2113`:font'
2114
2115Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2116XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2117is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2118versions of Emacs.
2119
2120For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2121be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2122must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2123
2124Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2125`defface'.
2126
2127*** Face attributes and X resources
2128
2129The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2130from X resources:
2131
2132 Face attribute X resource class
2133-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2134 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2135 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2136 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2137 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2138 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2139 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2140 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2141 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2142 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2143 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2144 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2145 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2146 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2147 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2148 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2149 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2150 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2151 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2152 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2153
2154+++
2155*** Text property `face'.
2156
2157The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2158specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2159specification can be
2160
21611. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2162
21632. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2164 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2165 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2166 for face attribute names.
2167
21683. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2169 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2170 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2171
2172+++
2173** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2174
acf3ecb7
EZ
2175The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2176on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2177the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2178default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2179`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2180used to clear the mapping table.
2181
acf3ecb7
EZ
2182** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2183
2184The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2185and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2186type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2187color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2188display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2189old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2190`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2191compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2192should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2193modify their color-related behavior.
2194
2195The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2196any frame type.
2197
8a5719f0
EZ
2198** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2199
2200The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2201`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2202`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2203`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2204`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2205`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2206display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2207the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2208platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2209
a933dad1
DL
2210+++
2211** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2212
463cac2d 2213This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2214
2215The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2216end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2217Otherwise, it returns zero.
2218
463cac2d
GM
2219** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2220
2221There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2222buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2223text-property.
2224
9a9dfda8 2225Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2226forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2227to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2228not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2229commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2230boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2231`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2232functions.
463cac2d
GM
2233
2234Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2235a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2236editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2237
9a9dfda8
GM
2238The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2239
2240- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2241
2242Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2243A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2244If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2245constrained position if that is is different.
2246
2247If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2248positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2249ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2250constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2251as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2252is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2253fields.
2254
2255If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2256NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2257unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2258C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2259only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2260
2261- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2262
2263Erases the field surrounding POS.
2264A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2265If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2266
2267- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2268
2269Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2270A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2271If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2272If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2273field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2274
2275- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2276
2277Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2278A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2279If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2280If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2281then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2282
2283- Function: field-string &optional POS
2284
2285Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2286A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2287If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2288
2289- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2290
2291Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2292A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2293If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2294
a933dad1
DL
2295+++
2296** Image support.
2297
2298Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2299strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2300(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2301replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2302
2303If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2304`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2305AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2306window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2307area.
2308
2309IMAGE is an image specification.
2310
2311*** Image specifications
2312
2313Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2314is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2315specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2316symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2317described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2318
2319The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2320
2321`:ascent ASCENT'
2322
576da55d
GM
2323ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2324If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2325to use for its ascent.
2326
2327If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2328image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2329
2330If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered with text drawn
2331in the same face as the image. The point the image is aligned with is
2332the middle of the height of the face's font. That point is usually
2333different from the font's base line.
a933dad1
DL
2334
2335`:margin MARGIN'
2336
79214ddf 2337MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2338margin around the image. Default is 0.
2339
2340`:relief RELIEF'
2341
2342RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2343around an image.
2344
2345`:algorithm ALGO'
2346
2347Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2348be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2349supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2350which is intended to display images "disabled."
2351
2352`:heuristic-mask BG'
2353
2354If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2355background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2356determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2357corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2358the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2359be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2360background of the image.
2361
2362`:file FILE'
2363
2364Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2365search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2366building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2367may be present in the image specification.
2368
518df5c4
GM
2369`:data DATA'
2370
2371Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2372supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2373present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2374support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2375
a933dad1
DL
2376*** Supported image types
2377
b246b1f6 2378**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2379
2380XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2381properties supported are
2382
2383`:foreground FG'
2384
2385FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2386is the frame's foreground.
2387
2388`:background FG'
2389
2390BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2391the frame's background color.
2392
2393XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2394case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2395instead of a `:file' property.
2396
2397`:width WIDTH'
2398
2399WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2400
2401`:height HEIGHT'
2402
2403HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2404
2405`:data DATA'
2406
2407DATA must be either
2408
2409 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2410 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2411
2412 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2413
2414 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2415 bitmap.
2416
c76e04a8
GM
2417 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2418 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2419 in the file.
2420
a933dad1
DL
2421**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2422
2423XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2424`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2425found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2426`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2427
2428Additional image properties supported are:
2429
2430`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2431
2432SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2433name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2434name.
2435
2436XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2437add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2438
a933dad1
DL
2439The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2440to display compressed images.
2441
2442**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2443
2444PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2445mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2446defined.
2447
2448**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2449
2450Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2451package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2452are:
2453
a933dad1
DL
2454**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2455
2456Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2457package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2458properties defined.
2459
2460**** GIF, image type `gif'
2461
2462Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2463`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2464
2465Additional image properties supported are:
2466
2467`:index INDEX'
2468
2469INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2470multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2471
2472This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2473For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2474at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2475every 0.1 seconds.
2476
2477(defun show-anim (file max)
2478 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2479 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2480
2481(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2482 (when (= idx max)
2483 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2484 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2485 (save-excursion
2486 (set-buffer buffer)
2487 (goto-char (point-min))
2488 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2489 (insert-image img "x"))
2490 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2491
2492**** PNG, image type `png'
2493
2494Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2495package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2496properties defined.
2497
2498**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2499
2500Additional image properties supported are:
2501
2502`:pt-width WIDTH'
2503
2504WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2505integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2506
2507`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2508
2509HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2510must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2511
2512`:bounding-box BOX'
2513
2514BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2515the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2516files. This is an required property.
2517
2518Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2519lisp/gs.el.
2520
2521*** Lisp interface.
2522
79214ddf
FP
2523The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2524which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2525
2526Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2527they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2528The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2529manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2530images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2531
2532*** Simplified image API, image.el
2533
2534The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2535creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2536can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2537define an image based on available image types. The functions
2538`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2539buffer.
2540
2541+++
2542** Display margins.
2543
2544Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2545and images.
2546
2547To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2548`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2549`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2550obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2551`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2552the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2553of the display margins.
2554
2555You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2556containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2557one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2558string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2559in this file).
2560
2561+++
2562** Help display
2563
2564Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2565moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2566`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2567that have a `help-echo' property.
2568
2569The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2570items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2571If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2572evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2573tool-bar item is used.
2574
2575The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2576help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2577help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2578
2579+++
2580** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2581
2582The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2583This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2584
2585The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2586scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2587The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2588scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2589used.
2590
79214ddf
FP
2591 (global-set-key [A-down]
2592 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2593 (interactive)
79214ddf 2594 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2595 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2596 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2597 #'(lambda ()
2598 (interactive)
79214ddf 2599 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2600 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2601
2602+++
2603** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2604
2605Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2606when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2607variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2608is called with one argument, POS.
2609
2610At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2611characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2612as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2613property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2614`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2615
2616+++
2617** Tool bar support.
2618
2619Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2620parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2621controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2622suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2623`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2624automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2625
2626*** Tool bar item definitions
2627
2628Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2629`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2630where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2631
a933dad1
DL
2632CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2633evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2634the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2635property (see below).
79214ddf 2636
a933dad1
DL
2637BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2638binding are currently ignored.
2639
2640The following properties are recognized:
2641
2642`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2643
a933dad1
DL
2644FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2645or disabled.
79214ddf 2646
a933dad1 2647`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2648
a933dad1 2649FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2650
a933dad1
DL
2651`:filter FUNCTION'
2652
2653FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2654FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2655used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2656
a933dad1
DL
2657`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2658
2659TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2660and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2661
a933dad1
DL
2662`:image IMAGES'
2663
2664IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2665image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2666meaning of each of the four elements:
2667
2668 Index Use when item is
2669 ----------------------------------------
2670 0 enabled and selected
2671 1 enabled and deselected
2672 2 disabled and selected
2673 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2674
a933dad1 2675`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2676
a933dad1
DL
2677Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2678is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2679
2680*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2681
2682If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2683resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2684than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2685
79214ddf 2686If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2687raised when the mouse moves over them.
2688
2689You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2690`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2691pixels. Default is 1.
2692
2693You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2694`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2695
2696*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2697
2698You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2699a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2700
2701 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2702 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2703 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2704
2705is the original tool bar item definition, then
2706
2707 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2708
2709makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2710item.
2711
2712** Mode line changes.
2713
2714+++
2715*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2716
2717The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2718that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2719a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2720
27211. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2722a `local-map' text property.
2723
27242. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2725that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2726
27273. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2728is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2729`local-map' property.
2730
2731The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2732properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2733example.
2734
54522c9f
GM
2735*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2736evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2737
a933dad1
DL
2738+++
2739*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2740variable mode-line-format to nil.
2741
2742+++
2743*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2744
2745This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2746`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2747completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2748`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2749line.
2750
2751The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2752`header-line'.
2753
2754The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2755position in the header-line.
2756
2757+++
2758** Text property `display'
2759
2760The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2761also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2762`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2763below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2764
2765*** Variable width and height spaces
2766
2767To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2768specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2769`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2770area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2771marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2772displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2773simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2774
2775The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2776PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2777properties described below.
2778
2779The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2780characters having the `display' property.
2781
2782- :width WIDTH
2783
2784Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2785character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2786
2787- :relative-width FACTOR
2788
2789Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2790first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2791same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2792width of that character by FACTOR.
2793
2794- :align-to HPOS
2795
2796Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2797value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2798
2799Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2800
2801- :height HEIGHT
2802
2803Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2804normal line height.
2805
2806- :relative-height FACTOR
2807
2808The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2809of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2810
2811- :ascent ASCENT
2812
2813Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2814used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2815baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2816equal to 100.
2817
2818You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
2819
2820*** Images
2821
2822A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
2823. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
2824in the display, the characters having this display specification in
2825their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
2826the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
2827`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
2828area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
2829the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
2830as display specification.
2831
2832*** Other display properties
2833
2834- :space-width FACTOR
2835
2836Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
2837should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
2838integer or float.
2839
2840- :height HEIGHT
2841
2842Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
2843
2844If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
2845means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
2846the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
2847``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
2848a font is available counts as a step.
2849
2850If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
2851as tall as the frame's default font.
2852
2853If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
2854height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
2855
2856Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
2857`height' bound to the current specified font height.
2858
2859- :raise FACTOR
2860
2861FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
2862font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
2863raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
2864amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
2865`:height' subproperty.
2866
2867*** Conditional display properties
2868
2869All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
2870has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
2871applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
2872During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
2873the text having the `display' property.
2874
2875The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
2876`(:when t SPEC)'.
2877
2878+++
2879** New menu separator types.
2880
2881Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
2882item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
2883treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
2884to specify other menu separator types.
2885
2886- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
2887
2888No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
2889separator occurs.
2890
2891- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
2892
2893A single line in the menu's foreground color.
2894
2895- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
2896
2897A double line in the menu's foreground color.
2898
2899- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
2900
2901A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2902
2903- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
2904
2905A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2906
2907- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
2908
2909A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
2910displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
2911
2912- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
2913
2914A single line with 3D raised appearance.
2915
2916- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
2917
2918A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
2919
2920- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
2921
2922A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
2923
2924- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
2925
2926Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2927
2928- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
2929
2930Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
2931
2932- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
2933
2934Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2935
2936- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
2937
2938Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
2939
2940Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
2941the corresponding single-line separators.
2942
2943+++
2944** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
2945
2946The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
2947`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
2948Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
2949that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
2950default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
2951default background is the background color of the frame, and the
2952default foreground is black.
2953
2954The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
2955(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
2956`ScrollBarBackground').
2957
2958Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
2959settings for scroll bar colors.
2960
2961+++
2962** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
2963display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
2964
2965---
2966** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
2967starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
2968on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
2969line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
2970the original window start.
2971
2972---
2973** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
2974`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
2975now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
2976
2977+++
2978** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
2979
2980A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
2981`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
2982windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
2983other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
2984
2985The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
2986fixed-width and fixed-height.
2987
2988 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
2989
2990A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
2991fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
2992window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
2993change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
2994temporarily to nil, for example
2995
2996 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
2997 (enlarge-window 10))
2998
79214ddf 2999Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3000or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3001
3002** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3003terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3004to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3005overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3006horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3007support a vertical-bar cursor).
e33b0397
DL
3008^L
3009* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3010
3011** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3012M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3013\f
3014* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3015
3016** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3017
3018You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3019Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3020`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3021
3022If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3023is the one that is used.
3024
3025** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3026the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3027Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3028separate from the command's regular output.
3029Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3030says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3031In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3032the buffer name.
3033
3034When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3035output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3036it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3037cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3038
3039** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3040the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3041is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3042created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3043
3044** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3045example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3046match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3047quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3048
3049** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3050now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3051if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3052they never ignore case.
3053
3054** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3055under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3056applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3057of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3058just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3059convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3060part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3061
3062If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3063the same format that was used in the file before.
3064
3065You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3066`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3067
3068** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3069renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3070This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3071
3072** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3073The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3074buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3075your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3076is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3077end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3078Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3079
3080The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3081eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3082control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3083format. You can now customize these variables.
3084
3085** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3086filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3087filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3088enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3089
3090** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3091in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3092windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3093
3094** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3095dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3096doesn't have any effect.
3097
3098** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3099not one per buffer.
3100
3101** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3102use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3103 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3104
3105** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3106To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3107`auto-show-mode' command.
3108
3109** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3110avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3111versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3112choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3113occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3114
3115** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3116cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3117
3118** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3119character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3120feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3121
3122** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3123the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3124interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3125and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3126
3127** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3128
3129The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3130that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3131one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3132codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3133set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3134
3135Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3136from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3137
3138IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3139equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3140a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3141`?' on other systems.
3142
3143IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3144feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3145Unix.
3146
3147Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3148current codepage when it starts.
3149
3150** Mail changes
3151
feab4fba
GM
3152*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3153`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3154appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3155non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3156MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3157headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3158latin-1:
3159
3160 MIME-version: 1.0
3161 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3162 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3163
a933dad1
DL
3164*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3165default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3166default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3167sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3168buffer-file-coding-system.
3169
3170You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3171sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3172mail.
3173
3174*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3175if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3176Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3177list of possible coding systems.
3178
3179** CC Mode changes
3180
3181*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3182modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3183longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3184docstring for details.
3185
3186*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3187symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3188found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3189prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3190lineup functions use this feature currently.
3191
3192*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3193"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3194
3195*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3196"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3197
3198*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3199from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3200symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3201c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3202anonymous classes.
3203
3204*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3205syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3206
3207*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3208inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3209support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3210function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3211
3212*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3213(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3214brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3215c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3216(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3217
3218*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3219
3220*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3221
3222*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3223for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3224
3225*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3226
3227*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3228associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3229This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3230circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3231class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3232
3233** Gnus changes.
3234
3235*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3236added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3237Gnus manual for the full story.
3238
3239*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3240before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3241group, which is created automatically.
3242
3243*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3244values.
3245
3246*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3247
3248*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3249outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3250
3251*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3252`C-u C-c C-c'.
3253
3254*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3255
3256*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3257re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3258
3259*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3260
3261*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3262Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3263
3264*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3265`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3266
3267*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3268control over simplification.
3269
3270*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3271
3272*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3273limit.
3274
3275*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3276
3277*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3278
79214ddf 3279*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3280If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3281rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3282
3283*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3284`a' forces normal posting method.
3285
3286*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3287-- `W d'.
3288
3289*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3290to a non-nil value.
3291
3292*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3293where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3294
3295*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3296has been added.
3297
3298*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3299
3300*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3301
3302*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3303`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3304
3305*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3306`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3307
3308*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3309
3310*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3311been added.
3312
3313*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3314`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3315
3316*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3317updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3318
3319*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3320
3321*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3322
3323*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3324
3325** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3326
3327*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3328options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3329nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3330
3331*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3332TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3333of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3334TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3335can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3336
3337*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3338All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3339but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3340the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3341
3342*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3343the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3344buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3345mismatch.
3346
3347** Changes to RefTeX mode
3348
3349*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3350file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3351
3352*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3353lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3354characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3355removed from the label.
3356
3357*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3358a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3359
3360*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3361customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3362
3363*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3364`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3365expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3366
3367*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3368
3369** New/deleted modes and packages
3370
3371*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3372SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3373
3374*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3375editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3376SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3377
3378*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3379changes with a special face.
3380
3381*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3382this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3383Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3384\f
3385* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3386
3387** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3388This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3389conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3390and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3391check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3392
3393The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3394Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3395distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3396
3397** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3398MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3399controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3400directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3401Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3402on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3403string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3404program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3405printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3406
3407** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3408output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3409available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3410input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3411temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3412program.
3413
3414An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3415and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3416programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3417automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3418as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3419ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3420
3421** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3422a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3423MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3424was not documented clearly before.
3425
3426** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3427This includes Tetris and Snake.
3428\f
3429* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3430
3431** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3432return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3433They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3434meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3435
3436** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3437WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3438and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3439
3440** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3441
3442*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3443It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3444
3445*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3446the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3447integers.
3448
3449** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3450files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3451arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3452file names and attributes are returned.
3453
3454** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3455sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3456accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3457It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3458returns the result.
3459
3460** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3461to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3462
3463** New functions for base64 conversion:
3464
3465The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3466into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3467performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3468optionally.
3469
3470Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3471job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3472
3473**
3474The new function process-running-child-p
3475will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3476terminal to its own child process.
3477
3478** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3479when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3480to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3481itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3482
3483** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3484be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3485
3486** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3487:included is an alias for :visible.
3488
3489easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3490easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3491to move or copy menu entries.
3492
3493** Multibyte editing changes
3494
3495*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3496an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3497make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3498work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3499char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3500 (setq char (sref str idx)
3501 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3502The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3503
3504If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3505(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3506 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3507
3508*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3509region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3510deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3511
3512 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3513
3514This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3515across the boundary.
3516
3517*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3518`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3519 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3520 contains 8-bit characters.
3521 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3522 contains invalid characters.
3523
3524*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3525text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3526preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3527text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3528way.
3529
3530*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3531If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3532end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3533prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3534
3535*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3536compose Thai characters in a string.
3537
3538** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3539argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3540for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3541menus should always use the third argument.
3542
3543** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3544read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3545arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3546input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3547
3548** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3549of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3550programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3551inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3552
3553** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3554the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3555returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3556echo area contents.
3557
3558 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3559
3560** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3561NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3562requested feature cannot be loaded.
3563
3564** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3565foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3566means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3567
3568** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3569gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3570
3571** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3572read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3573unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3574end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3575
3576** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3577the gap of the current buffer.
3578
3579** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3580to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3581current buffer.
3582
3583** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3584facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3585These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3586it back in after any modifications have been made.
3587\f
3588* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3589
3590** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3591the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3592/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3593directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3594subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3595
3596Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3597names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3598Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3599which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3600these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3601
3602Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3603starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3604time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3605
3606This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3607Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3608to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3609subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3610`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3611results.
3612
3613** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3614GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3615that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3616fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3617\f
3618* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3619
3620** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3621including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3622it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3623perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3624
3625** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3626specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3627region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3628further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3629command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3630within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3631are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3632region.
3633
3634In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3635selective undo.
3636
3637** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3638unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3639buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3640effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3641Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3642
3643The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3644though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3645-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3646load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3647
3648** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3649no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3650enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3651something that most users not do.
3652
3653** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3654operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3655The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3656applications.
3657
3658C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3659pasting operations.
3660
3661** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3662setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3663like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3664printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3665`ps-printer-name'.
3666
3667** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3668minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3669any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3670except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3671incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3672hits a new word.
3673
3674Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3675Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3676to be confused by TeX commands.
3677
3678You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3679correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3680clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3681of various alternative replacements and actions.
3682
3683Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3684the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3685corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3686alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3687flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3688
3689Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3690flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3691
3692** Changes in input method usage.
3693
3694Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3695the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3696respectively.
3697
3698You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3699
3700If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3701of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3702
3703The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3704that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3705
3706 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3707
3708 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3709
3710 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3711 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3712
3713 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3714 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3715 o When you are using a complex input method.
3716 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3717
3718If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3719input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3720and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3721setting it to t is helpful.
3722
3723The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3724
3725In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3726keys:
3727 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3728 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3729 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3730These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3731environment.
3732
3733** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3734names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3735minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3736get
3737
3738 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3739
3740which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3741
3742Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3743Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3744
3745** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3746at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3747its owner and group.
3748
3749** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3750Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3751
3752** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3753contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3754
3755** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3756which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3757in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3758by the left edge of the rectangle.
3759
3760** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3761increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3762C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3763for writing keyboard macros.
3764
3765** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3766files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3767frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3768the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3769additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3770info.
3771
3772** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3773
3774** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3775query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3776contents only.
3777
3778** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3779confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3780the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3781says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3782
3783** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3784non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3785literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3786
3787** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3788now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3789Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3790inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3791
3792** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
3793failure if the command produces no output.
3794
3795** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
3796manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
3797the mouse.
3798
3799** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
3800mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
3801function and variable names.
3802
3803** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
3804reading specific files. This has higher priority than
3805file-coding-system-alist.
3806
3807** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
3808t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
3809converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
3810the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
3811according to the current fontset.
3812
3813** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
3814
3815The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
3816that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
3817nonascii-insert-offset.
3818
3819For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
3820enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
3821nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
3822characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
3823
3824** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
3825an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
3826
3827** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
3828letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
3829
3830** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
3831are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
3832command keys.
3833
3834** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
3835user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
3836
3837Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
3838user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
3839all variables that have documentation.
3840
3841** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
3842shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
3843that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
3844minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
3845it should show; the default is 20.
3846
3847Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
3848the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
3849of your input.
3850
3851** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
3852all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
3853recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
3854argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
3855the customizable options which were changed since that version.
3856Newly added options are included as well.
3857
3858If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
3859then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
3860for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
3861
3862This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
3863Customize menu.
3864
3865** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
3866the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
3867
3868** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
3869buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
3870invoked.
3871
3872** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
3873that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
3874The default is 1.
3875
3876** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
3877syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
3878new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
3879(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
3880sensibly.
3881
3882** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
3883
3884** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
3885value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
3886two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
3887
3888** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
3889reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
3890for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
3891every night.
3892
7464346d
GM
3893** Desktop changes
3894
3895*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
3896the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
3897
7464346d
GM
3898*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
3899and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
3900
a933dad1
DL
3901** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
3902read and post multi-lingual articles.
3903
3904** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
3905doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
3906be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
3907outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
3908the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 3909made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
3910
3911** Mail reading and sending changes
3912
3913*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
3914the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
3915changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
3916toggle.
3917
3918*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
3919now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
3920summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
3921the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
3922rmail-default-body-file.
3923
3924*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
3925longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
3926handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
3927
3928*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
3929it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
3930is evaluated to insert the signature.
3931
3932*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
3933outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
3934handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
3935putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
3936transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
3937especially interested in trying feedmail.
3938
3939feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
3940feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
3941provided by feedmail are:
3942
3943**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
3944stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
3945there is also a queue for draft messages
3946
3947**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
3948be prompted for confirmation
3949
3950**** does smart filling of address headers
3951
3952**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
3953the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
3954can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
3955
3956**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
3957the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
3958/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
3959function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
3960
3961** Dired changes
3962
3963*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
3964files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
3965
3966*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
3967run Dired on the directory name at point.
3968
3969*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
3970files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
3971for a specified regexp.
3972
3973** VC Changes
3974
3975*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
3976conveniently.
3977
3978*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
3979faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
3980Dired.
3981
3982VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
3983directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
3984listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
3985currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
3986
3987You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
3988then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
3989vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
3990control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
3991on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
3992
3993All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
3994is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
3995`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
3996the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
3997`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
3998
3999The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4000toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4001VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4002`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4003
4004Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4005ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4006command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4007
4008*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4009file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4010session to resolve them.
4011
4012Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4013resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4014contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4015uses as well).
4016
4017*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4018command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4019you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4020either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4021branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4022If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4023using ediff.
4024
4025** Changes in Font Lock
4026
4027*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4028are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4029use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4030unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4031compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4032
4033** Frame name display changes
4034
4035*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4036frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4037raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4038when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4039
4040*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4041frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4042menu.
4043
4044** Comint (subshell) changes
4045
4046*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4047subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4048with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4049
4050*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4051
4052C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4053that is, the line after the last line you got.
4054You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4055
4056C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4057send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4058the following line.
4059
4060C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4061which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4062previously sent input.
4063
4064C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4065it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4066as the search string.
4067
4068*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4069automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4070
4071** C mode changes
4072
4073*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4074and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4075assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4076definition.
a933dad1
DL
4077
4078*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4079(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4080Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4081style is still the default however.
4082
4083*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4084
4085*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4086are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4087them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4088
4089*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4090and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4091
4092*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4093namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4094
4095*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4096makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4097
4098*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4099c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4100
4101*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4102should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4103package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4104variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4105
4106** Changes to hippie-expand.
4107
79214ddf 4108*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4109non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4110which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4111
4112*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4113non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4114expanding dynamically.
4115
4116*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4117non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4118
4119*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4120non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4121this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4122expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4123
4124*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4125
4126** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4127
4128*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4129bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4130automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4131bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4132against the first word in the title.
4133
4134*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4135capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4136bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4137lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4138lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4139bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4140
4141*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4142generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4143replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4144bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4145
4146** Changes in vcursor.el.
4147
4148*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4149and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4150variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4151entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4152`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4153in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4154
4155*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4156Editing group once the package is loaded.
4157
4158*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4159generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4160vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4161
4162*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4163vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4164
4165** Ispell changes.
4166
79214ddf
FP
4167*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4168buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4169are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4170
4171*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4172A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4173and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4174defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4175include:
a933dad1
DL
4176
4177 o URLs are automatically skipped
4178 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4179
4180*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4181
4182** Changes to RefTeX mode
4183
4184RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4185large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4186re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4187section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4188
4189*** New recursive parser.
4190
4191The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4192entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4193recursive parser scans the individual files.
4194
4195*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4196
a933dad1
DL
4197Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4198partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4199the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4200
4201 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4202
4203*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4204
4205This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4206
4207 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4208
4209*** Using multiple selection buffers
4210
4211If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4212for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4213
4214 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4215
4216*** References to external documents.
4217
4218The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4219documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4220documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4221macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4222RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4223the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4224The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4225
4226*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4227
4228The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4229and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4230
4231Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4232the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4233
4234*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4235
4236The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4237buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4238
4239*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4240
4241The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4242contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4243`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4244have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4245enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4246at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4247more.
4248
4249*** Support for the varioref package
4250
4251The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4252
4253*** New hooks
4254
4255Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4256and citations are created. These hooks are
4257`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4258`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4259
4260*** Citations outside LaTeX
4261
4262The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4263a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4264
4265*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4266
4267The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4268fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4269fontified, use
4270
4271 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4272
4273** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4274With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4275the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4276directories that contain the same file name.
4277
4278Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4279Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4280file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4281Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4282have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4283names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4284directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4285directory.
4286
4287** New modes and packages
4288
4289*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4290It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4291it, but some do not.
4292
4293*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4294code.
4295
4296*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4297current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4298around in a buffer.
4299
4300Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4301
4302*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4303uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4304be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4305established system of notation similar to Chess.
4306
4307*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4308documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4309guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4310
4311*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4312available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4313system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4314simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4315functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4316the like.
4317
4318*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4319identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4320
4321*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4322within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4323used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4324the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4325
4326*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4327
4328 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4329 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4330 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4331 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4332 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4333 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4334 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4335 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4336 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4337 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4338 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4339
4340 Platform-specific modes:
4341
4342 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4343 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4344 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4345 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4346 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4347 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4348 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4349 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4350 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4351\f
4352* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4353
4354** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4355use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4356That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4357Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4358
4359Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4360you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4361consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4362
4363** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4364and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4365specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4366searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4367
4368** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4369multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4370character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4371environment.
4372
4373** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4374take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4375string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4376current input method for reading this one event.
4377
4378** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4379now control whether to output certain characters as
4380backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4381non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4382characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4383in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4384\f
4385* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4386
4387** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4388of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4389
4390** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4391in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4392always increases point by 1.
4393
4394The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4395considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4396
4397See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4398
4399** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4400Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4401default value changed. For example,
4402
4403 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4404 :type 'integer
4405 :group 'foo
4406 :version "20.3")
4407
79214ddf 4408 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4409 :version "20.3")
4410
4411If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4412default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4413is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4414`:version' in the top level group.
4415
4416This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4417
4418** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4419starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4420
4421However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4422symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4423support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4424to themselves.
4425
4426If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4427this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4428values whatever.
4429
4430** There is a new debugger command, R.
4431It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4432in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4433
4434** Frame-local variables.
4435
4436You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4437the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4438local bindings for that variable.
4439
4440These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4441frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4442modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4443parameter name.
4444
4445Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4446Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4447active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4448that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4449
4450It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4451clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4452very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4453through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4454
4455** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4456"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4457evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4458makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4459See the documentation in sregex.el.
4460
4461** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4462is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4463parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4464The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4465
4466** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4467If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4468
4469** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4470known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4471define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4472
4473** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4474when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4475it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4476history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4477
4478The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4479return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4480empty input.
4481
4482** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4483for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4484`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4485Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4486`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4487
4488** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4489echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4490a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4491default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4492
4493** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4494specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4495function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4496place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4497non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4498
4499** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4500If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4501up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4502end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4503
4504** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4505which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4506If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4507
4508** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4509holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4510was directed to display this buffer.
4511
4512** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4513with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4514describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4515other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4516set-window-configuration.
4517
4518** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4519window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4520positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4521windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4522
4523** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4524override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4525look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4526
4527If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4528non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4529map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4530
4531minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4532and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4533
4534** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4535except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4536
4537** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4538USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4539floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4540
4541** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4542to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4543in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4544it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4545
4546** Menu changes
4547
4548*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4549keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4550better supported.
4551
4552The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4553a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4554you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4555can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4556then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4557
4558*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4559
4560In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4561 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4562defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4563starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4564
4565The format is:
4566 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4567 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4568where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4569string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4570The supported properties include
4571
4572:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4573 item is enabled.
4574:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4575 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4576:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4577 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4578 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4579 It should return a binding to use instead.
4580:keys DESCRIPTION
4581 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4582 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4583 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4584:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4585 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4586 keyboard binding.
4587:key-sequence nil
4588 This means that the command normally has no
4589 keyboard equivalent.
4590:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4591:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4592 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4593 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4594 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4595
4596Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4597Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4598
4599(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4600
4601** New event types
4602
4603*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4604mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4605corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4606which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4607
4608 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4609
4610where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4611same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4612indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4613negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4614the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4615forward, away from the user.
4616
4617As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4618
4619*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4620files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4621and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4622filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4623loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4624
4625 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4626
4627where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4628same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4629that were dragged and dropped.
4630
4631As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4632
4633** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4634
4635*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4636any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4637to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4638
4639*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4640can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4641that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4642
4643*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4644in Emacs 19 and before.
4645
4646The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4647The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4648
4649*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4650buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4651unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4652representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4653
4654This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4655as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4656viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4657one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4658will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4659
4660This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4661representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4662(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4663consistent with the new representation.
4664
4665*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4666representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4667about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4668however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4669
4670The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4671nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4672using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4673
4674*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4675representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4676representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4677
4678The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4679loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4680is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4681
4682*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4683which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4684
4685*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4686which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4687
4688*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4689portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4690so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4691You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4692
4693*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4694it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4695
4696*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4697convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4698buffer or string being searched.
4699
4700One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4701[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4702searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4703searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4704obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4705you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4706expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4707
4708*** Structure of coding system changed.
4709
4710All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4711by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4712which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4713as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4714vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4715your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4716define-coding-system-alias.
4717
4718The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4719the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4720access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4721pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4722character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4723safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4724'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4725`iso-8859-1'.
4726
4727Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4728The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4729coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4730(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4731
4732Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4733also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4734are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4735the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4736
4737*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4738proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4739This function requires a user interaction.
4740
4741*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4742find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4743select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4744systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4745a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4746select-safe-coding-system.
4747
4748*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4749decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4750last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4751was done.
4752
4753*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4754used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4755coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4756
4757*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4758return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4759characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4760`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4761
4762*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4763coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4764coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4765converted.
4766
4767*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4768coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4769
4770*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4771character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4772character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4773each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4774either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4775range of characters.
4776
4777*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4778Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4779
4780*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4781in the current buffer at position POS.
4782
4783*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4784input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4785function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4786character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4787event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4788binding input-method-function to nil.
4789
4790The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4791method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4792input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
4793the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
4794not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
4795
4796The input method function is not called when reading the second and
4797subsequent events of a key sequence.
4798
4799*** You can customize any language environment by using
4800set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
4801
4802The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
4803customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
4804instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
4805environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
4806exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
4807\f
4808* Changes in Emacs 20.1
4809
4810** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
4811options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
4812at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
4813tree structure.
4814
4815M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
4816user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
4817
4818With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
4819session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
4820in your .emacs file.)
4821
4822** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
4823You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
4824
4825** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
4826This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
4827
4828** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
4829immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
4830kills the region.
4831
4832The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
4833delete the character before point, as usual.
4834
4835** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
4836on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
4837by setting search-highlight to nil.)
4838
4839** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
4840insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
4841the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
4842onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
4843history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
4844past.)
4845
4846** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
4847This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
4848in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
4849TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
4850makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
4851
4852As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
4853and is an alias for it.
4854
4855If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
4856use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
4857
4858** Scrolling changes
4859
4860*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
4861position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
4862
4863In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
4864on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
4865where it started.
4866
4867*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
4868move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
4869screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
4870does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
4871
4872*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
4873top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
4874comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
4875recenters the window.
4876
4877** International character set support (MULE)
4878
4879Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
4880including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
4881Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
4882Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
4883features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
4884MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
4885
4886Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
4887coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
4888character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
4889variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
4890into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
4891
4892Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
4893generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
4894supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
4895language, to make it possible to type them.
4896
4897The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
4898character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
4899
4900The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
4901to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
4902
4903You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
4904
4905 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
4906
4907Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
4908characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
4909argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
4910already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
4911characters for their work until they want to change.
4912
4913*** Input methods
4914
4915An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
4916specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
4917has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
4918the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
4919support several input methods.
4920
4921The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
4922another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
4923work.
4924
4925A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
4926characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
4927composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
4928consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
4929sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
4930letter.
4931
4932The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
4933by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
4934First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
4935marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
4936mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
4937
4938None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
4939they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
4940phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
4941converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
4942
4943Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
4944word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
4945typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
4946the first guess is wrong.
4947
4948*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
4949turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
4950
4951If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
4952byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
4953they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
4954the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
4955
4956However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
4957use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
4958includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
4959translate automatically to and from either one.
4960
4961*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
4962
4963Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
4964file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
4965sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
4966what you want.
4967
4968If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
4969example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
4970system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
4971multibyte characters in that buffer.
4972
4973If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
4974character conversion as well.
4975
4976*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
4977
4978A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
4979Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
4980requires using many fonts.
4981
4982Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
4983collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
4984
4985A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
4986the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
4987have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
4988you would use a font.
4989
4990If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
4991specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
4992display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
4993
4994The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
4995(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
4996characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
4997or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
4998and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
4999
5000*** Defining fontsets.
5001
5002Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5003chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5004with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5005
5006Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5007of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5008`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5009standard fontset are created automatically.
5010
5011If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5012argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5013FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5014with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5015name is `fontset-startup'.
5016
5017Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5018The resource value should have this form:
5019 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5020FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5021 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5022 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5023 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5024The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5025of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5026CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5027FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5028
5029Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5030last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5031You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5032
5033For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5034font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5035following resource,
5036 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5037the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5038 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5039Here is the substitution rule:
5040 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5041 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5042 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5043 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5044 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5045
5046The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5047fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5048that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5049
5050With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5051like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5052name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5053fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5054fontsets.
5055
5056*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5057defaults for a particular choice of language.
5058
5059Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5060method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5061visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5062already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5063language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5064system for new files that you create.
5065
5066It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5067set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5068whole Emacs session.
5069
5070For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5071chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5072with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5073
5074*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5075specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5076specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5077the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5078coding systems that Emacs supports.
5079
5080*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5081lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5082This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5083After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5084is used for *the immediately following command*.
5085
5086So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5087write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5088
5089If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5090then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5091
5092For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5093visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5094
5095*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5096construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5097to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5098specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5099of the file.
5100
5101*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5102the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5103code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5104translated into that character code.
5105
5106This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5107various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5108
5109By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5110
5111*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5112the coding system for keyboard input.
5113
5114Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5115with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5116some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5117
5118By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5119
5120Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5121input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5122translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5123to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5124designed to work with terminals.
5125
5126*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5127specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5128This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5129has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5130translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5131in the corresponding buffer.
5132
5133By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5134
5135*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5136to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5137It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5138
5139*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5140an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5141command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5142want to use.
5143
5144C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5145method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5146
5147*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5148layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5149remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5150which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5151
5152*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5153the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5154related information.
5155
5156*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5157HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5158scripts.
5159
5160*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5161information about the support for a particular language.
5162You specify the language as an argument.
5163
5164*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5165the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5166first dash.
5167
5168A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5169(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5170whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
51711 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5172
5173 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5174 B big5 (Chinese)
5175 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5176 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5177 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5178 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5179 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5180 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5181 K euc-korea (Korean)
5182 R koi8 (Russian)
5183 Q tibetan
5184 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5185 T lao
5186 T tis620 (Thai)
5187 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5188 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5189 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5190 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5191 z hz (Chinese)
5192
5193When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5194two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5195coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5196keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5197
5198*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5199conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5200
5201When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5202into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5203rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5204Rmail files themselves.
5205
5206*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5207conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5208
5209Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5210for sending mail:
5211
5212- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5213- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5214- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5215 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5216- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5217
5218*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5219to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5220Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5221translations.
5222
5223** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5224of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5225insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5226without any conversion.
5227
5228** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5229You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5230RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5231any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5232
5233** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5234functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5235
5236Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5237Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5238
5239Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5240mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5241
5242** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5243complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5244in the buffer before point.
5245
5246With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5247symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5248you are using.
5249
5250With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5251just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5252
5253** File locking works with NFS now.
5254
5255The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5256in the same directory as FILENAME.
5257
5258This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5259works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5260can become a bottleneck.
5261
5262The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5263does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5264create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5265file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5266rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5267so useful that the change is worth while.
5268
5269When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5270are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5271collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5272tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5273
5274** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5275it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5276show-paren-mode.
5277
5278** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5279selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5280delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5281
5282** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5283within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5284complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5285
5286** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5287it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5288set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5289
5290** Changes in View mode.
5291
5292*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5293Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5294
5295*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5296view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5297
5298*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5299previous state.
5300
5301*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5302scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5303
5304*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5305non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5306not just the selected window.
5307
5308*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5309read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5310turns View mode on or off.
5311
5312*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5313how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5314delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5315
5316** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5317now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5318
5319** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5320has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5321presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5322which version to compare with.
5323
5324** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5325blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5326
5327The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5328is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5329isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5330shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5331
5332By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5333of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5334blocks, all of them or none.
5335
5336** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5337current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5338confirmation first.
5339
5340** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5341now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5342However, the mode will not be changed if
5343(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5344(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5345 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5346(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5347
5348This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5349
5350However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5351these commands do not change the major mode.
5352
5353** M-x occur changes.
5354
5355*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5356it performs a case-sensitive search.
5357
5358*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5359if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5360using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5361
5362** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5363in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5364window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5365that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5366buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5367
5368** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5369after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5370appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5371come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5372
5373** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5374selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5375buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5376
5377** Outline mode changes.
5378
5379*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5380
5381*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5382
5383** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5384you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5385Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5386was already active.
5387
5388The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5389unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5390get confused by it.
5391
5392If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5393set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5394
5395** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5396
5397*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5398conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5399character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5400including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5401
5402The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5403mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5404copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5405
5406*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5407are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5408values.
5409
5410`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5411case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5412`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5413case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5414
5415** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5416certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5417can be. The default value is 30.
5418
5419** Changes in Mail mode.
5420
5421*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5422Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5423composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5424`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5425`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5426behavior.
5427
5428C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5429compose-mail-other-frame.
5430
5431*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5432the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5433replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5434buffer that shows the original message.
5435
5436*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5437with separator lines around the contents.
5438
5439*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5440in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5441definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5442need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5443
5444*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5445
5446**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5447for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5448controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5449Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5450
5451**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5452to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5453/etc/passwd.
5454
5455**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5456to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5457/etc/passwd.
5458
5459** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5460special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5461directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5462reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5463
5464Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5465when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5466be taken to be magic.
5467
5468** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5469files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5470available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5471
5472M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5473(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5474
5475** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5476suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5477
5478In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5479
5480new key dired.el binding old key
5481------- ---------------- -------
5482 * c dired-change-marks c
5483 * m dired-mark m
5484 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5485 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5486 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5487 * u dired-unmark u
5488 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5489 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5490 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5491 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5492 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5493 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5494
5495** Rmail changes.
5496
5497*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5498saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5499chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5500each time you run it.
5501
5502*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5503whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5504
5505*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5506messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5507means to move in the opposite direction.
5508
5509*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5510you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5511
5512*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5513just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5514It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5515can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5516for output.
5517
5518** Gnus changes.
5519
5520*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5521
79214ddf
FP
5522*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5523Gnus.
a933dad1 5524
79214ddf 5525*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5526`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5527
5528*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5529article mode line.
5530
5531*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5532
5533*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5534
5535(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5536
5537*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5538are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5539`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5540
5541*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5542
5543*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5544
5545*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5546See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5547
5548*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5549Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5550used to pick articles.
5551
5552*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5553another have been added.
5554
5555 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5556
5557*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5558generating lines in buffers.
5559
5560*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5561`M-C-_'.
5562
5563*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5564
5565*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5566
5567 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5568
5569*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5570
a933dad1
DL
5571 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5572
5573*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5574Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5575
5576*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5577the native server.
5578
5579 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5580
5581*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5582(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5583
5584*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5585
5586*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5587even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5588
5589*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5590(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5591
5592 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5593 a group.
5594
5595*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5596sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5597
5598 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5599
5600*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5601
5602 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5603
5604*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5605
a933dad1
DL
5606 Use the `Y c' command.
5607
5608*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5609
5610*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5611
5612 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5613
5614*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5615from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5616
a933dad1
DL
5617 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5618
5619*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5620
5621*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5622the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5623
5624 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5625
5626Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5627and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5628from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5629hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5630this issue.)
5631
5632Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5633automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5634particular news group. This can be done by:
5635
5636 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5637
5638Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5639of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5640"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5641system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5642for reading and posting).
5643
5644CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5645 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5646Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5647newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5648there.
5649
5650Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5651default. Here are some of these default settings:
5652
5653 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5654 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5655 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5656 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5657 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5658
5659When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5660the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5661
5662** CC mode changes.
5663
5664*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5665code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5666values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5667this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5668Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5669loaded.
5670
5671If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5672Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5673style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5674share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5675c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5676must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5677
5678*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5679of the current buffer.
5680
5681*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5682it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5683of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5684
5685*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5686style that the Python developers like.
5687
5688*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5689This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5690just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5691
5692** VC Changes [new]
5693
5694** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5695name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5696directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5697
5698This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5699master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5700developers.
5701
5702You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5703RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5704
5705*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5706other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5707writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5708calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5709
5710*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5711version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5712
5713** Calendar changes.
5714
5715A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5716of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5717for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5718
5719** ps-print changes
5720
79214ddf 5721There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5722
5723*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5724
5725The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5726formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5727`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5728`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5729It defaults to `letter'.
5730If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5731
5732The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5733of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5734non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5735
5736The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5737It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5738It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5739
5740*** Horizontal layout
5741
5742The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5743`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5744All are measured in points.
5745
5746*** Vertical layout
5747
5748The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5749`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5750All are measured in points.
5751
5752*** Headers
5753
5754If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5755`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5756margin above the text.
5757
79214ddf 5758If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5759framing box is printed around the header.
5760
5761The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5762`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5763
79214ddf
FP
5764The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5765`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5766`ps-header-font-size'.
5767
5768*** Font managing
5769
5770The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5771used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5772`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5773elements to this alist.
5774
79214ddf 5775The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5776for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5777
5778** hideshow changes.
5779
5780*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5781C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5782
5783*** Support for java-mode added.
5784
5785*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5786in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5787
5788*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5789the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5790way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5791
5792*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
5793robust and a lot faster.
5794
79214ddf 5795*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
5796
5797*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
5798to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
5799documentation for more details.
5800
5801** Changes in Enriched mode.
5802
5803*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
5804filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
5805of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
5806use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
5807the next time unless the fill-column is different.
5808
5809*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
5810distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
5811as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
5812as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
5813
5814** Font Lock mode
5815
5816*** Custom support
5817
5818The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
5819font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
5820faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
5821group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
5822your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
5823consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
5824
5825You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
5826
5827*** Maximum decoration
5828
5829Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
5830default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
5831of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
5832supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
5833to get the old behavior.
5834
5835*** New support
5836
5837Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
5838
5839Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
5840support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
5841
5842*** Configurable support
5843
5844Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
5845additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
5846c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
5847java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
5848list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
5849of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
5850convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
5851
5852Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
5853way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
5854it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
5855
5856*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
5857
5858You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
5859highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
5860for any mode.
5861
5862For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
5863
5864 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
5865
5866in your ~/.emacs.
5867
5868*** New faces
5869
5870Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
5871font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
5872distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
5873to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
5874
5875*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
5876
5877The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
5878cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
5879same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
5880
5881*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
5882
5883The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
5884according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
5885the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
5886non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
5887refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
5888the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
5889Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
5890
5891This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
5892For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
5893this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
5894refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
5895containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
5896the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
5897
5898As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
5899
5900Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
5901Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
5902Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
5903new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
5904
5905If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
5906settings.
5907
5908** Ada mode changes.
5909
5910*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
5911If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
5912procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
5913you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
5914stubs.
5915
5916*** There are two new commands:
5917 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
5918 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
5919
5920The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
5921`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 5922`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
5923
5924*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
5925is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
5926Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
5927
5928*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
5929formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
5930places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
5931space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
5932
5933** Scheme mode changes.
5934
5935*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
5936mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
5937for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
5938with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
5939have any effect.
5940
5941If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
5942still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
5943scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
5944variables as buffer-local variables.
5945
5946*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
5947Use M-x dsssl-mode.
5948
133c9e59
GM
5949** Changes to the emacsclient program
5950
875c1439
GM
5951*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
5952USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
5953associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
5954can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
5955
133c9e59 5956*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
5957it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
5958buffer in Emacs.
5959
133c9e59
GM
5960*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
5961use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
5962ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
5963option takes precedence.
5964
a933dad1
DL
5965** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
5966constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
5967(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
5968
5969** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
5970which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
5971the current defun.
5972
5973** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
5974following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
5975
5976** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
5977and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
5978necessary).
5979
5980** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
5981if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
5982these register values no longer become completely useless.
5983If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
5984asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
5985it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
5986
5987** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
5988example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
5989be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
5990you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
5991
5992You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
5993variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
5994file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
5995revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
5996only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
5997
5998** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
5999since it applies only to the current frame.
6000
6001** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6002file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6003and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6004
6005This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6006multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6007variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6008tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6009instead of just the file you are editing.
6010
6011** RefTeX mode
6012
6013RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6014and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6015different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6016multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6017turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6018
79214ddf 6019C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6020 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6021 knows which kind of label is needed.
6022
6023C-c ) reftex-reference
6024 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6025 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6026
6027C-c [ reftex-citation
6028 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6029 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6030
6031C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6032 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6033
6034C-c = reftex-toc
6035 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6036 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6037
a933dad1
DL
6038Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6039commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6040Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6041reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6042C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6043
6044** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6045
6046*** Info documentation is now available.
6047
6048*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6049both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6050
6051*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6052bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6053
6054*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6055(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6056
6057*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6058entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6059appropriate functions.
6060
6061*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6062entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6063
6064*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6065been cleaned.
6066
6067*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6068bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6069
6070*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6071shall be delimited.
6072
6073*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6074bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6075bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6076
6077*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6078field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6079prefixed with `ALT'.
6080
6081*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6082bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6083formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6084documentation).
6085
6086*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6087documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6088for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6089
6090*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6091comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6092
6093*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6094alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6095signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6096
6097*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6098
6099*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6100
6101*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6102from alien sources.
6103
6104*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6105to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6106crossref entries.
6107
6108*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6109region.
6110
6111*** Added support for imenu.
6112
6113*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6114of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6115`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6116`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6117
6118*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6119from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6120
6121** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6122
30a009a5 6123** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6124
a933dad1
DL
6125** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6126functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6127Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6128as an argument.
6129
6130When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6131and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6132
6133** browse-url changes
6134
6135*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6136Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6137(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6138non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6139customization variables.
6140
6141*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6142
6143*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6144lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6145(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6146
6147** Changes in Ediff
6148
6149*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6150pops up the Info file for this command.
6151
6152*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6153the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6154merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6155directories).
6156
6157*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6158and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6159files in the same directory.
6160
6161*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6162The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6163related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6164
6165** Changes in Viper
6166
6167*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6168*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6169 instead of vip-.
6170*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6171*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6172Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6173*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6174*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6175*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6176color when Viper is in insert state.
6177*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6178Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6179viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6180
6181** Etags changes.
6182
6183*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6184default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6185Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6186variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6187not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6188
6189*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6190
6191*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6192constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6193
6194*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6195recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6196In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6197
6198*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6199C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6200recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6201methods and protocols.
6202
6203*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6204.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6205column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6206paragraph name.
6207
6208*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6209an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6210at least M times and as many as N times.
6211
6212** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6213in files has changed slightly.
6214
6215With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6216time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6217This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6218with old time-stamp-format values.
6219
6220In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6221(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6222This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6223reasons.
6224
6225In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6226natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6227fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6228(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6229time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6230specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6231
6232Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6233case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6234truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6235
6236The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6237being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6238future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6239recommended now will continue to work then.
6240
6241See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6242details.
6243
6244** There are some additional major modes:
6245
6246dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6247m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6248meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6249
6250** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6251copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6252into Emacs.
6253
6254** New Lisp packages include:
6255
6256*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6257
6258*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6259be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6260
6261*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6262
6263*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6264in shell buffers.
6265
6266*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6267See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6268and `elint-defun'.
6269
6270*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6271meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6272ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6273strings or comments.
6274
6275These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6276abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6277you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6278insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6279at these points.
6280
6281*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6282can visit them by short forms of their names.
6283
6284*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6285Emacs Lisp function at point.
6286
6287*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6288
6289*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6290switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6291
6292*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6293
6294*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6295
6296*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6297
6298*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6299from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6300
6301*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6302You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6303inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6304original place after inserting the copy.
6305
6306*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6307on the buffer.
6308
6309You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6310velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6311(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6312
6313Enable mouse-drag with:
6314 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6315-or-
6316 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6317
6318*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6319mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6320
6321*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6322It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6323
6324*** ogonek
6325
6326The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6327Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6328platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6329TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6330ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6331prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6332instance) and vice versa.
6333
6334To use this package load it using
6335 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6336Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6337 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6338 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6339The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6340ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6341
6342*** Interface to ph.
6343
6344Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6345
6346The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6347services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6348these servers.
6349
6350*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6351
6352*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6353You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6354while the real cursor does not move.
6355
6356*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6357for visiting your favorite web sites.
6358
6359*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6360so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6361
6362** movemail change
6363
6364Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6365mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6366supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6367user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6368
6369This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6370\f
6371* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6372
6373** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6374
6375Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6376end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6377Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6378file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6379file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6380
6381To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6382C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6383coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6384specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6385LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6386save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6387\f
6388* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6389
6390** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6391Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6392vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6393Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6394
6395** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6396to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6397
6398In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6399don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6400"win".
6401
6402** Basic Lisp changes
6403
6404*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6405evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6406
6407*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6408be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6409or by the user.
6410
6411The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6412
6413*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6414
6415(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6416(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6417
6418*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6419usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6420its argument.
6421
6422*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6423
6424*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6425
6426*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6427
6428*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6429error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6430include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6431`format' function.
6432
6433*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6434or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6435whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6436
6437*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6438either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6439adding one of these suffixes.
6440
6441*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6442which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6443If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6444
6445We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6446because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6447
6448*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6449
6450*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6451You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6452
6453*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6454conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6455
6456 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6457
6458BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6459BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6460
6461*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6462choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6463restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6464works using `save-current-buffer'.
6465
6466*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6467write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6468of the last form.
6469
6470*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6471which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6472last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6473as the last form.
6474
6475*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6476characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6477matches.
6478
6479For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6480
6481*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6482with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6483Then it returns that string.
6484
6485For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6486
6487(with-output-to-string
6488 (princ "The buffer is ")
6489 (princ (buffer-name)))
6490
6491returns "The buffer is foo".
6492
6493** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6494is non-nil.
6495
6496These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6497buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6498characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6499
6500*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6501a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6502
6503Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6504character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6505Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6506position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6507characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6508 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6509
6510ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6511Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6512non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6513characters".
6514
6515The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6516through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6517"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6518range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6519leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6520
6521*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6522(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6523multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6524character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6525
6526This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6527always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6528
6529However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6530
a933dad1
DL
6531*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6532because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6533have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6534the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6535guaranteed.
6536
6537*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6538between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6539character).
6540
6541When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6542
6543 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6544 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6545 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6546 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6547 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6548
6549*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6550
6551*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6552`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6553more than the number of characters.
6554
6555You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6556it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6557\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6558is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6559follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6560newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6561
6562*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6563and returns a string containing those characters.
6564
6565*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6566(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6567counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6568character, sref signals an error.
6569
6570*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6571in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6572string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6573
6574*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6575in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6576region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6577
6578*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6579the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6580to a vector of the characters in it.
6581
6582*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6583of a string. You call it as follows:
6584
6585 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6586
6587This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6588STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6589This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6590Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6591it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6592
6593*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6594if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6595
6596*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6597if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6598
6599*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6600to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6601not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6602which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6603
6604(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6605
6606This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6607
6608The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6609If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6610are not included in the resulting value.
6611
6612The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6613at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6614WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6615is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6616
6617If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6618place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6619character extends across that column), then the padding character
6620PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6621string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6622column START-COLUMN.
6623
6624*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6625the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6626necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6627difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6628changed text, before the change.
6629
6630*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6631sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6632one character set for each script, not for each language.
6633
6634**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6635
6636**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6637
6638**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6639set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6640
6641**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6642name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6643which identify the character within that character set.
6644
6645**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6646byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6647opposite of split-char.
6648
6649**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6650of all the characters between BEG and END.
6651
6652**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6653of all the characters in a string.
6654
6655*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6656and specifying coding systems.
6657
6658**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6659system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6660of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6661(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6662and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6663as what to do about code conversion.)
6664
6665**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6666name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6667
6668**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6669for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6670except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6671
6672Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6673which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6674to match against a file name.
6675
6676VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6677a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6678decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6679to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6680systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6681specifies the coding system for encoding.
6682
6683If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6684or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6685
6686**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6687the coding system to use for network sockets.
6688
6689Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6690which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6691either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6692service names.
6693
6694VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6695a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6696decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6697to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6698systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6699specifies the coding system for encoding.
6700
6701If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6702or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6703
6704**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6705for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6706except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6707start the subprocess.
6708
6709**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6710systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6711when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6712(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6713to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6714
6715**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6716coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6717subprocess.
6718
6719It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6720but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6721start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6722connection permanently or until overridden.
6723
6724The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6725file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6726network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6727coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6728It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6729system for one operation at a time.
6730
6731**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6732files, subprocesses or network connections.
6733
6734**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6735coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6736The value is a cons cell,
6737 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6738where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6739the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6740input to the subprocess.
6741
6742**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6743change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6744
6745** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6746customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6747you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6748
6749You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6750variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6751information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6752legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6753customization.
6754
6755Thus, instead of writing
6756
6757 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6758 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6759
6760you would now write this:
6761
6762 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6763 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6764 :type 'boolean
6765 :group foo)
6766
6767The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6768two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6769describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6770for a description of them.
6771
6772The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6773should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6774
6775 (defgroup ispell nil
6776 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6777 :group 'processes)
6778
6779The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6780group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6781but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6782to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6783second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6784
6785Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6786package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6787have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6788package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6789first-level subgroups.
6790
6791** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6792
6793This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
6794separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
6795
6796** easy-mmode
6797
6798The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
6799developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
6800only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
6801predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
6802`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
6803`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
6804
6805** Text property changes
6806
6807*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
6808text property.
6809
6810*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
6811previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
6812place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
6813functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
6814starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
6815
6816If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
6817LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
6818of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
6819position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
6820
6821*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
6822value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
6823is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
6824
6825** Changes in invisibility features
6826
6827*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
6828hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
6829is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
6830should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
6831would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
6832make the overlay visible.
6833
6834During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
6835invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
6836needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
6837which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
6838the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
6839t when it should hide it.
6840
6841*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
6842
6843Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
6844invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
6845and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 6846Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 6847manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
6848Here is an example of how to do this:
6849
6850 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 6851 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 6852 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 6853 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
6854
6855 ...
6856 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
6857
6858 ...
6859 ;; When done with the overlays:
6860 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
6861 ;; Or respectively:
6862 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
6863
6864** Changes in syntax parsing.
6865
6866*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
6867`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
6868obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
6869`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
6870
6871If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
6872is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
6873used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
6874
6875When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
6876character in the buffer is calculated thus:
6877
6878 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
6879 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
6880
6881 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
6882 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
6883 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
6884
6885 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
6886 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
6887 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
6888 determine the syntax type of the character.
6889
6890 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
6891 of the current buffer.
6892
6893*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
6894value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
6895for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
6896
6897*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
6898and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
6899only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
6900character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
6901another character with the same code (unless quoted).
6902
6903These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
6904text property.
6905
6906*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
6907arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
6908of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
6909
6910*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
6911(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
6912element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
6913nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
6914string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
6915
6916*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
6917syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
6918`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
6919
6920** Changes in face features
6921
6922*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
6923if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
6924
6925*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
6926of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
6927
6928*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
6929set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
6930
6931*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
6932set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
6933
6934*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
6935by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
6936and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
6937the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
6938overlay property).
6939
6940This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
6941arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
6942
6943** Changes in file-handling functions
6944
6945*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
6946directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
6947they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
6948is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
6949
6950This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
6951begins with ~.
6952
6953*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
6954it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
6955
6956*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
6957the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
6958
6959*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
6960as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
6961
6962*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
6963character code conversion as well as other things.
6964
6965Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
6966(formerly it did not).
6967
6968*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
6969environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
6970
6971*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
6972instead of constant strings.
6973
6974*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
6975to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
6976any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
6977
6978substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
6979in the same way as before.
6980
6981*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
6982The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
6983which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
6984
6985*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
6986error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
6987else, and returns nil.
6988
6989*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
6990directory cannot be listed.
6991
6992** Changes in minibuffer input
6993
6994*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
6995read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
6996additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
6997argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
6998ways:
6999
7000 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7001 It is available through the history command M-n.
7002
7003*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7004read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7005argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7006minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7007enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7008
7009In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7010argument in this way.
7011
7012*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7013from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7014minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7015
7016** Echo area features
7017
7018*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7019echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7020minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7021after the echo area is cleared.
7022
7023*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7024in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7025
7026** Keyboard input features
7027
7028*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7029set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7030
7031*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7032received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7033by keyboard macros.
7034
7035** Frame-related changes
7036
7037*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7038creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7039hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7040
7041*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7042the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7043has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7044
7045*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7046selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7047value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7048in the selected frame.
7049
7050*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7051is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7052which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7053
7054** X Windows features
7055
7056*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7057x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7058x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7059
7060*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7061The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7062
7063*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7064MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7065A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7066
7067If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7068it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7069
7070** Subprocess features
7071
7072*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7073functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7074automatically.
7075
7076*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7077and returns the output from the command as a string.
7078
7079*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7080and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7081
7082** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7083does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7084
7085** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7086at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7087goes after the other menu items.
7088
7089** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7090of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7091around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7092are in use.
7093
7094The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7095series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7096
7097Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7098after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7099form.
7100
7101** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7102is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7103but its hook is still run.
7104
7105** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7106for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7107
7108If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7109regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7110useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7111
7112This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7113are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7114filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7115warned.
7116
7117** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7118way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7119
7120** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7121integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7122functions like display-time.
7123
7124** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7125name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7126
7127** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7128can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7129is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7130
7131** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7132if there is an error in compilation.
7133
7134** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7135switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7136argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7137they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7138
7139** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7140Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7141the *scratch* buffer.
7142
7143** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7144The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7145where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7146e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7147
7148** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7149and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7150It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7151
7152** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7153using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7154variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7155and compose-mail-other-frame.
7156
7157** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7158can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7159full name of the specified user will be returned.
7160
7161** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7162of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7163where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7164in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7165option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7166files at all.
7167
7168** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7169and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7170width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7171the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7172
7173For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7174minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7175with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7176is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7177
7178** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7179
7180** imenu.el changes.
7181
7182You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7183item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7184
7185An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7186#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7187select one of those items.
7188\f
7189* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7190\f
7191* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7192
7193** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7194mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7195
7196** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7197use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7198Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7199\f
7200* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7201
7202** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7203To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7204
7205** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7206conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7207matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7208expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7209word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7210all caps.
7211
7212** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7213at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7214
7215When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7216does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7217as in previous Emacs versions.
7218
7219** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7220non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7221time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7222frames.
7223
7224** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7225if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7226This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7227Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7228accident.
7229
7230** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7231keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7232It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7233line and then executing the macro.
7234
7235This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7236
7237** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7238(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7239characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7240characters.
7241
7242** Font Lock mode
7243
7244*** Font Lock support modes
7245
7246Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7247below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7248hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7249to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7250Font Lock mode is enabled.
7251
7252For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7253
7254 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7255
7256in your ~/.emacs.
7257
7258*** lazy-lock
7259
7260The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7261only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7262becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7263Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7264occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7265buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7266Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7267
7268To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7269
7270 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7271
7272To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7273
7274** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7275
7276*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7277paren and key.
7278
7279*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7280supported.
7281
7282** Gnus changes.
7283
7284Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7285commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7286significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7287previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7288
7289Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7290between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7291
79214ddf 7292*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7293variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7294obsolete.
7295
7296*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7297missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7298
7299 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7300
7301*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7302
7303 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7304
7305*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7306referred.
a933dad1
DL
7307
7308*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7309
7310 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7311
7312*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7313
7314 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7315
7316*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7317buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7318
7319 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7320
7321*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7322
7323 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7324
7325*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7326
7327 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7328
7329*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7330
7331 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7332
7333*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7334is possible.
7335
7336 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7337
7338*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7339groups of groups.
7340
7341*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7342
7343*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7344batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7345
7346*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7347
7348*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7349
7350*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7351
7352 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7353
7354*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7355expiration times.
7356
7357*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7358
7359*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7360process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7361
7362*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7363articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7364bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7365
7366*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7367articles with the `*' command.
7368
7369*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7370
7371*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7372
7373 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7374
7375*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7376
79214ddf 7377*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7378`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7379
7380*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7381buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7382
7383*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7384
7385*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7386
7387*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7388
7389 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7390
79214ddf 7391*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7392
7393 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7394
79214ddf 7395*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7396
7397*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7398
79214ddf 7399*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7400
79214ddf 7401 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7402 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7403
7404*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7405refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7406
7407 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7408
7409*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7410buffer to allow easier treatment.
7411
7412*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7413
7414*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7415
7416 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7417
7418*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7419articles.
a933dad1
DL
7420
7421 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7422
79214ddf 7423*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7424
7425*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7426cited text to hide is now customizable.
7427
7428 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7429
7430*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7431
7432 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7433
7434*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7435
7436*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7437
7438The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7439in greater detail.
7440\f
7441* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7442
7443** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7444second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7445asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7446exists.
7447
7448** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7449as well as lists.
7450
7451** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7452of a given keymap.
7453
7454** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7455given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7456keymap or nil.
7457
7458** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7459an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7460name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7461menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7462equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7463alias.
7464\f
7465* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7466
7467** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7468
7469Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7470This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7471was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7472far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7473pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7474
7475For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7476you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7477`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7478
7479** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7480
7481The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7482do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7483It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7484much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7485chapter of the manual for details.
7486
7487However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7488customization variables take effect.
7489
7490** Marking with the mouse.
7491
7492When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7493highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7494using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7495
7496** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7497
7498*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7499
7500*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7501to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7502
7503*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7504in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7505you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7506application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7507applications, these problems are significant.
7508
7509If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7510likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7511However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7512will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7513other DOS application as a subprocess.
7514
7515Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7516You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7517
7518If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7519subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7520have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7521Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7522separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7523Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7524
7525** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7526
7527This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7528which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7529minibuffer contains.
7530
7531** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7532
7533The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7534It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7535It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7536affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7537
7538The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7539it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7540and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7541when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7542
7543** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7544enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7545
7546** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7547F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7548Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7549
7550If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7551menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7552something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7553the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7554
7555 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7556
7557** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7558to replace the characters it "deletes".
7559
7560** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7561
7562** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7563a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7564select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7565It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7566immediately after the selected one.
7567
7568This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7569made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7570
7571** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7572
7573Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7574directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7575If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7576Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7577recover-session.
7578
7579You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7580auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7581will not work.
7582
7583Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7584normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7585this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7586bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7587now that the bug is fixed.
7588
7589** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7590
7591There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7592when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7593Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7594which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7595
7596If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7597telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7598VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7599the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7600
7601** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7602Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7603is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7604
7605There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7606Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7607enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7608The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7609remain normal.
7610
7611** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7612header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7613
7614Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7615known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7616offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7617Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7618
7619Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7620of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7621a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7622name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7623documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7624`mail-directory-stream'.)
7625
7626** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7627skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7628characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7629with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7630
7631Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7632- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7633wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7634
7635The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7636less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7637headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7638Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7639Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7640fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7641to a limitation in font-lock).
7642
7643External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7644
7645** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7646buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7647buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7648this example:
7649
7650 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7651 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7652
7653** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7654
7655*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7656
7657*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7658
7659*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7660
7661*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7662entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7663will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7664isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7665(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7666The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7667
7668*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7669does the same job.
7670
7671*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7672"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7673
7674*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7675text.
7676
7677** Font Lock mode
7678
7679*** Global Font Lock mode
7680
7681Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7682new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7683font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7684turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7685on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7686
7687For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7688
7689 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7690
7691in your ~/.emacs.
7692
7693*** Local Refontification
7694
7695In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7696However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7697those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7698command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7699
7700In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7701(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7702current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7703above and below point.
7704
7705With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7706
7707** Follow mode
7708
7709Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7710buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7711side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7712they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7713split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7714follow-mode.
7715
7716M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7717
7718To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7719command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7720
7721** hide-show changes.
7722
7723The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7724to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7725normal hooks.
7726
7727** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7728The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7729
7730** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7731recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7732those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7733
7734** MSDOS Changes
7735
7736*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7737Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7738
7739*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7740and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7741
7742*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7743
7744*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7745pressing both mouse buttons.
7746
7747*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7748restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7749are:
a933dad1
DL
7750
7751**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7752now works.
7753
7754**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7755
7756**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7757implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7758
7759**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7760
7761**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7762
7763**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7764
7765**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7766
7767**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7768\f
7769* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7770
7771** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7772tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7773remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7774this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7775behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7776
7777** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7778
7779The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7780not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7781need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7782be different.
7783
7784It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7785than `system-type'.
7786
7787See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7788
7789** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7790now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7791
7792** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
7793that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
7794
7795** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
7796no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
7797reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
7798
7799The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
7800to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
7801like this:
7802
7803 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7804
7805SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
7806It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
7807becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
7808
7809REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
7810seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
7811means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
7812
7813*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
7814up if too much time passes.
7815
7816 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
7817
7818This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
7819If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
7820of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
7821form in BODY.
7822
7823*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
7824a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
7825call looks like this:
7826
7827 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7828
7829SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
7830runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
7831timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
7832ARGS.
7833
7834Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
7835command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
7836command.
7837
7838REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
7839time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
7840does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
7841each time Emacs becomes idle.
7842
7843If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
7844idle for SECS seconds.
7845
7846*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
7847all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
7848programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
7849instead.
7850
7851*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
7852there is no answer within a certain time.
7853
7854 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
7855
7856asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
7857within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
7858Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
7859
7860** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
7861arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
7862meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
7863arguments in between are ignored.
7864
7865This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
7866the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
7867
7868** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
7869/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
7870/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
7871site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
7872version.
7873
7874It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
7875version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
7876for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
7877has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
7878and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
7879problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
7880
7881** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
7882.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
7883systems with limited file name syntax.
7884
7885Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
7886convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
7887for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
7888completions.el:
7889
7890(defvar save-completions-file-name
7891 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
7892 "*The filename to save completions to.")
7893
7894This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
7895depends on the operating system, because the definition of
7896convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
7897Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
7898MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
7899
7900** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
7901rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
7902minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
7903
7904** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
7905marker from its buffer position.
7906
7907** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
7908Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
7909The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
7910
7911** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
7912that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
7913condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
7914of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
7915matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
7916regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
7917
7918This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
7919errors that happen often during editing.
7920
7921** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
7922into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
7923puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
7924
7925** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
7926now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
7927
7928** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
7929a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
7930name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
7931to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
7932and not get-buffer-window.
7933
7934** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
7935calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
7936being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
7937
7938If you use this feature, you should set the variable
7939buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
7940property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
7941non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
7942are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
7943property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
7944over and over for the same text.
7945
7946** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
7947
7948*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
7949in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
7950
7951;; @(#) HEADER: text
7952;; $HEADER: text $
7953
7954in addition to the normal
7955
7956;; HEADER: text
7957
7958*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
7959checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
7960lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
7961\f
7962* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7963
7964----------------------------------------------------------------------
7965Copyright information:
7966
404fa7d6 7967Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
7968
7969 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
7970 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
7971 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
7972 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
7973
7974 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
7975 of this document, or of portions of it,
7976 under the above conditions, provided also that they
7977 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
7978\f
7979Local variables:
7980mode: outline
7981paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
7982end: